annotate etc/NEWS @ 25890:b10a34d40b55

(Qbitmap_spec_p): Replaces Qpixmap_spec_p. (Fbitmap_spec_p): Replaces Fpixmap_spec_p. (load_pixmap): Use Fbitmap_spec_p and Qbitmap_spec_p instead of Fpixmap_spec_p and Qpixmap_spec_p. (load_face_colors, check_lface_attrs, merge_face_vector_with_property, Finternal_set_lisp_face_attribute): Use Fbitmap_spec_p. (syms_of_xfaces): Initialize Qbitmap_spec_p, defsubr Fbitmap_spec_p.
author Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
date Thu, 07 Oct 1999 00:41:24 +0000
parents 62b8ede0e424
children 918acea58309
Ignore whitespace changes - Everywhere: Within whitespace: At end of lines:
rev   line source
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 23 Jan 1999
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2 Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3 See the end for copying conditions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5 Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6 For older news, see the file ONEWS.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
8
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
9 * Changes in Emacs 21.1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
10
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
11 ** Faces and frame parameters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
12
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
13 There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
14 Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
15 `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
16 `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
17 sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
18 for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
19 parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
20
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
21 Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
22 `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
23 `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
24 `default' face and vice versa.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
25
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
26 ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
27
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
28 The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
29 colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
30 correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
31 the screen gamma of a frame's display.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
32
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
33 PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
34 in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
35 color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
36
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
37 The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
38 `ScreenGamma'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
39
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
40 ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
41
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
42 The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
43 Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
44 oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
45 of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
46 the text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
47
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
48 ** Emacs has a new face implementation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
49
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
50 The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
51 font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
52 height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
53 These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
54 specify a font.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
55
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
56 Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
57 These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
58 under Lisp changes, below.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
59
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
60 ** New default font is Courier 12pt.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
61
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
62 ** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
63 its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
64 it is hollow.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
65
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
66 ** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
67 truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
68 foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
69 customizing face `fringe'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
70
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
71 ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
72 can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
73
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
74 ** LessTif support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
75
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
76 Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
77 need a version 0.88.1 or later.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
78
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
79 ** Toolkit scroll bars.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
80
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
81 Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
82 LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
83 configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
84 bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
85 bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
86 Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
87
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
88 When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
89 Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
90 Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
91 Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
92 define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
93 `s/freebsd.h' as an example.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
94
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
95 Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
96 a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
97 directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
98 different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
99 system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
100 add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
101
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
102 The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
103 `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
104 This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
105 image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
106 Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
107
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
108 ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
109
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
110 When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
111 widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
112 Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
113
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
114 ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
115
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
116 When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
117 whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
118 defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
119 highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
120 displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
121 whitespace.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
122
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
123 ** Busy-cursor.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
124
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
125 Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
126 display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
127
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
128 ** Blinking cursor
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
129
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
130 M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
131 terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
132 and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
133 the group `cursor'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
134
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
135 ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
136
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
137 This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
138 generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
139 See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
140 details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
141
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
142 Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
143 have to do anything to activate it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
144
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
145 ** Tabs and variable-width text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
146
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
147 Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
148 defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
149 independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
150 Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
151
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
152 ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
153
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
154 *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
155
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
156 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
157
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
158 The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the Motif
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
159 one.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
160
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
161 *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, like in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
162 Motif.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
163
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
164 ** Hscrolling in C code.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
165
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
166 Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
167
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
168 ** Tool bar support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
169
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
170 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
171 how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
172
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
173 ** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
174
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
175 Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
176 mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
177 line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
178 about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
179 in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
180
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
181 Currently, the following actions have been defined:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
182
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
183 - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
184 buffers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
185
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
186 - Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
187 M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
188
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
189 - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
190
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
191 - Mouse-1 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*')
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
192 toggles the read-only status.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
193
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
194 - Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
195
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
196 ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
197
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
198 When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
199 from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialogs' is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
200 non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
201
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
202 ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
203
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
204 Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
205 Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
206 the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
207 italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
208 Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
209 attributes like overlines, strike-throught, box are ignored.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
210
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
211 ** Sound support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
212
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
213 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
214 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
215 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
216 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
217 to enable sound support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
218
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
219 ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
220 the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
221 forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
222 value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
223 users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
224 even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
225
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
226 The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
227
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
228 ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
229
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
230 As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
231 drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
232 `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
233
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
234 ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
235 bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
236
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
237 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
238 `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
239 variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
240
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
241 ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
242
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
243 When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
244 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
245 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
246 fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
247
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
248 When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
249 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
250 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
251 fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
252
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
253 ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
254 notably at the end of lines.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
255
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
256 All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
257 spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
258
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
259 ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
260 query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
261 after each match to get the replacement text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
262
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
263 ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
264
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
265 If a message is longer than one line, or mini-buffer contents are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
266 longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the mini-window unless it is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
267 on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum mini-window size
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
268 by setting the following variable:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
269
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
270 - User option: max-mini-window-height
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
271
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
272 Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
273 fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
274 specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
275
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
276 Default is 0.25.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
277
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
278 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
279
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
280 *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
281 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
282 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
283 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
284 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
285 can be edited from that buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
286
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
287 *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
288 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
289 `A' to use all marked entries).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
290
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
291 *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
292 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
293
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
294 *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
295 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
296 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
297 been cited.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
298
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
299 ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
300 has the following new features:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
301
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
302 *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
303 may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
304 to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
305 time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
306
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
307 *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
308 feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
309 file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
310 compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
311 pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
312 defaults to 1.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
313
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
314 ** Tooltips.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
315
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
316 Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
317 mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
318 can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
319
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
320 Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
321 variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
322 the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
323 tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
324
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
325 ** Customize changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
326
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
327 *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
328 `State' menu to add comments.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
329
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
330 *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
331 Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
332 default).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
333
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
334 ** New features in evaluation commands
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
335
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
336 The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
337 modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
338 print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
339 customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
340 eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
341
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
342 ** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
343 To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
344 modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
345 start sequences.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
346
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
347 ** Dired changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
348
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
349 *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
350 command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
351 is, delete only empty directories.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
352
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
353 *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
354 command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
355 copy directories recursively.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
356
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
357 ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
358 use the -f option when sending mail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
359
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
360 ** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
361 selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
362
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
363 ** New modes and packages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
364
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
365 *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
366
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
367 *** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
368
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
369 *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
370
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
371 *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
372 Pascal) language.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
373
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
374 *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
375 the text at point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
376
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
377 *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
378
25862
62b8ede0e424 Mention fortune.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25853
diff changeset
379 *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
62b8ede0e424 Mention fortune.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25853
diff changeset
380
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
381 *** whitespace.el ???
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
382
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
383 ** Withdrawn packages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
384
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
385 *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
386 functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
387
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
388 * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
389
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
390 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
391 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
392 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
393 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
394
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
395 ** New function `propertize'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
396
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
397 The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
398 strings with text properties.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
399
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
400 - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
401
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
402 Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
403 by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
404 PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
405 specified value of that property. Example:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
406
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
407 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
408
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
409 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
410 ** push and pop macros.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
411
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
412 A simple version of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
413 is now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
414 as the place that holds the list to be changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
415
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
416 (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
417 (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
418 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
419
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
420 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
421 ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
422 as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
423
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
424 [:digit:] matches 0 through 9
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
425 [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
426 [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
427 [:blank:] matches space and tab only
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
428 [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
429 space, and DEL.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
430 [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
431 and DEL.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
432 [:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
433 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
434 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
435 [:alpha:] matches letters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
436 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
437 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
438 [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
439 [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
440 [:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
441 [:punct:] matches punctuation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
442 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
443 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
444 [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
445 [:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
446 [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
447
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
448 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
449 ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
450
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
451 The following functions are defined for hash tables:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
452
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
453 - Function: make-hash-table ARGS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
454
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
455 The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
456 are optional. The following arguments are defined:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
457
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
458 :test TEST
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
459
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
460 TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
461 Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
462 it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
463
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
464 :size SIZE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
465
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
466 SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
467 many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
468
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
469 :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
470
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
471 REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
472 full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
473 size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
474 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
475 old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
476
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
477 :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
478
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
479 THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
480 hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
481 (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
482
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
483 :weakness WEAK
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
484
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
485 WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
486 Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
487 their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
488 hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
489
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
490 - Function: makehash &optional TEST
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
491
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
492 Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
493
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
494 - Function: hash-table-p TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
495
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
496 Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
497
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
498 - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
499
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
500 Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
501 values are shared.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
502
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
503 - Function: hash-table-count TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
504
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
505 Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
506
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
507 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
508
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
509 Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
510
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
511 - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
512
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
513 Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
514
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
515 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
516
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
517 Returns the size of TABLE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
518
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
519 - Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
520
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
521 Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
522
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
523 - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
524
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
525 Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
526
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
527 - Function: clrhash TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
528
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
529 Clear TABLE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
530
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
531 - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
532
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
533 Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
534 not found.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
535
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
536 - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
537
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
538 Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
539 another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
540
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
541 - Function: remhash KEY TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
542
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
543 Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
544
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
545 - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
546
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
547 Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
548 arguments KEY and VALUE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
549
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
550 - Function: sxhash OBJ
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
551
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
552 Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
553
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
554 - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
555
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
556 Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
557 a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
558 comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
559 and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
560 of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
561
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
562 TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
563
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
564 HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
565 code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
566 integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
567
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
568 Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
569 be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
570
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
571 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
572 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
573
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
574 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
575 (sxhash (upcase a)))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
576
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
577 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
578 'case-fold-string-hash))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
579
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
580 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
581
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
582 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
583 ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
584
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
585 It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
586 circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
587 a cons cell which is its own cdr.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
588
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
589 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
590 ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
591
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
592 If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
593 #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
594
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
595 You can also do several calls to print functions using a common
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
596 set of #N= constructs; here is how.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
597
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
598 (let ((print-circle t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
599 (print-continuous-numbering t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
600 print-number-table)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
601 (print1 ...)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
602 (print1 ...)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
603 ...)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
604
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
605 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
606 ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
607 t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
608 specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
609 is too short to reach that column.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
610
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
611 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
612 ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
613 now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
614 after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
615 two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
616
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
617 If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
618 perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
619 and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
620
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
621 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
622 ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
623 to specify which buffer to return the size of.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
624
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
625 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
626 ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
627 calendar-move-hook after moving point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
628
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
629 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
630 ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
631 directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
632 small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
633 small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
634 temporary-file-directory instead.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
635
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
636 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
637 ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
638 the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
639 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
640 hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
641
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
642 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
643 ** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
644 elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
645
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
646 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
647 ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
648
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
649 make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
650 creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
651 ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
652
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
653 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
654 ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
655
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
656 The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
657 on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
658 is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
659 never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
660 ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
661 overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
662
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
663 If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
664 that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
665 to get an error if the file exists at that time.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
666 The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
667
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
668 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
669 ** Function `format' now handles text properties.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
670
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
671 Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
672 If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
673 ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
674 result string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
675
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
676 Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
677 string where arguments appear in the result string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
678
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
679 Example:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
680
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
681 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
682 (s2 "world"))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
683 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
684 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
685 (format s1 s2)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
686
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
687 results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
688
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
689 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
690 ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
691
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
692 Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
693 The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
694 argument in it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
695
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
696 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
697 (arg "world"))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
698 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
699 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
700 (message msg arg))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
701
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
702 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
703 ** Sound support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
704
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
705 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
706 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
707
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
708 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
709 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
710 to enable sound support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
711
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
712 Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
713 list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
714 when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
715 functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
716 sound to play, before playing the sound.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
717
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
718 The following sound properties are supported:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
719
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
720 - `:file FILE'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
721
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
722 FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
723 searched relative to `data-directory'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
724
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
725 - `:volume VOLUME'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
726
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
727 VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
728 0..1. This property is optional.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
729
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
730 Other properties are ignored.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
731
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
732 ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
733
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
734 * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
735
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
736 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
737 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
738 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
739 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
740
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
741 ** New face implementation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
742
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
743 Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
744 font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
745
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
746 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
747 *** New faces.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
748
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
749 Each face can specify the following display attributes:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
750
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
751 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
752
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
753 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
754 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
755
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
756 3. Font height in 1/10pt
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
757
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
758 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
759
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
760 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
761
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
762 6. Foreground color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
763
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
764 7. Background color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
765
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
766 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
767
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
768 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
769
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
770 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
771
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
772 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
773
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
774 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
775 color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
776
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
777 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
778 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
779
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
780 Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
781 same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
782 frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
783 faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
784 with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
785 attributes mentioned above.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
786
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
787 There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
788 definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
789 created frames.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
790
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
791 A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
792 have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
793 `fully-specified'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
794
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
795 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
796 *** Face merging.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
797
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
798 The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
799 combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
800 aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
801 properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
802 that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
803 results in a fully-specified face.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
804
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
805 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
806 *** Face realization.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
807
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
808 After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
809 merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
810 realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
811 available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
812 face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
813 cache of the frame on which it was realized.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
814
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
815 Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
816 character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
817 for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
818 charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
819
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
820 Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
821 specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
822 being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
823 the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
824 statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
825
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
826 In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
827 `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
828 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
829 the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
830 initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
831 Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
832
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
833 Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
834 `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
835 registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
836 with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
837
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
838 ++++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
839 **** Clearing face caches.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
840
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
841 The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
842 on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
843 unused fonts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
844
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
845 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
846 *** Font selection.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
847
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
848 Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
849 given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
850 for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
851
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
852 If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
853 pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
854 family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
855 property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
856 an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
857
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
858 Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
859 against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
860 match for the given face attributes in this font list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
861
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
862 Font selection can be influenced by the user.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
863
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
864 The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
865 attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
866 face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
867 names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
868 that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
869 width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
870 to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
871
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
872 Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
873 specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
874 face doesn't exist.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
875
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
876 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
877 **** Scalable fonts
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
878
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
879 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
880 since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
881 servers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
882
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
883 To enable scalable font use, set the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
884 `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means nver use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
885 scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
886 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
887 scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
888 that list. Example:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
889
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
890 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
891
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
892 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
893
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
894 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
895 *** Functions and variables related to font selection.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
896
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
897 - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
898
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
899 Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
900 is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
901 string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
902
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
903 If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
904 the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
905 FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
906 POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
907 SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
908 These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
909 if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
910 REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
911 the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
912 of the face font sort order.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
913
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
914 - Function: x-font-family-list
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
915
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
916 Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
917 omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
918 (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
919 non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
920
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
921 - Variable: font-list-limit
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
922
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
923 Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
924 won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
925 matching font. The default is currently 100.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
926
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
927 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
928 *** Setting face attributes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
929
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
930 For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
931 with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
932 implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
933 `face-attribute'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
934
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
935 Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
936 symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
937
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
938 The following attributes are recognized:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
939
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
940 `:family'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
941
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
942 VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
943 or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
944 and `?' are allowed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
945
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
946 `:width'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
947
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
948 VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
949 It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
950 `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
951 `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
952
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
953 `:height'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
954
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
955 VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
956 1/10 pt.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
957
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
958 `:weight'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
959
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
960 VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
961 symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
962 `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
963
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
964 `:slant'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
965
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
966 VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
967 symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
968 `reverse-oblique'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
969
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
970 `:foreground', `:background'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
971
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
972 VALUE must be a color name, a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
973
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
974 `:underline'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
975
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
976 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
977 VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
978 a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
979 don't underline.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
980
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
981 `:overline'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
982
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
983 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
984 VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
985 string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
986 overline.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
987
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
988 `:strike-through'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
989
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
990 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
991 striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
992 face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
993 is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
994
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
995 `:box'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
996
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
997 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
998 around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
999 VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1000 of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1001 and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1002 VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1003 :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1004 the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1005 specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1006 defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1007 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1008 color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1009 should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1010 like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1011 that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1012 the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1013 box.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1014
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1015 `:inverse-video'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1016
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1017 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1018 inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1019
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1020 `:stipple'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1021
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1022 If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1023 The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1024 searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1025 HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1026 is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1027 explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1028
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1029 For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1030 and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1031
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1032 `:font'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1033
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1034 Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1035 XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1036 is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1037 versions of Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1038
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1039 For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1040 be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1041 must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1042
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1043 Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1044 `defface'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1045
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1046 *** Face attributes and X resources
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1047
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1048 The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1049 from X resources:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1050
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1051 Face attribute X resource class
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1052 -----------------------------------------------------------------------
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1053 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1054 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1055 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1056 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1057 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1058 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1059 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1060 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1061 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1062 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1063 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1064 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1065 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1066 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1067 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1068 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1069 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1070 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1071 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1072
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1073 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1074 *** Text property `face'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1075
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1076 The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1077 specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1078 specification can be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1079
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1080 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1081
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1082 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1083 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1084 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1085 for face attribute names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1086
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1087 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1088 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1089 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1090
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1091 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1092 ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1093
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1094 The function `face-register-tty-color' can be used to define colors
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1095 for use on TTY frames. It maps a color name to a color number on the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1096 terminal. Emacs defines a couple of default color mappings by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1097 default. You can get defined colors with a call to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1098 `tty-defined-colors'. The function `face-clear-tty-colors' can be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1099 used to clear the mapping table.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1100
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1101 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1102 ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1103 This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1104
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1105 A number of functions such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1106 forward-paragraph, and beginning-of-line, stop moving when they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1107 come to the boundary between the prompt and the actual contents.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1108 The function erase-buffer does not delete the prompt.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1109
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1110 The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1111 end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1112 Otherwise, it returns zero.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1113
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1114 The function buffer-string does not return the portion of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1115 mini-buffer belonging to the prompt; buffer-substring does.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1116
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1117 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1118 ** Image support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1119
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1120 Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1121 strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1122 (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1123 replaces the display of the characters having that property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1124
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1125 If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1126 `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1127 AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1128 window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1129 area.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1130
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1131 IMAGE is an image specification.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1132
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1133 *** Image specifications
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1134
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1135 Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1136 is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1137 specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1138 symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1139
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1140 The following is a list of properties all image types share.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1141
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1142 `:ascent ASCENT'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1143
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1144 ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, and specifies the percentage
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1145 of the image's height to use for its ascent. Default is 50.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1146
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1147 `:margin MARGIN'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1148
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1149 MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1150 margin around the image. Default is 0.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1151
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1152 `:relief RELIEF'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1153
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1154 RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1155 around an image.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1156
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1157 `:algorithm ALGO'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1158
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1159 Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1160 be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1161 supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1162 which is intended to display images "disabled."
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1163
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1164 `:heuristic-mask BG'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1165
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1166 If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1167 background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1168 determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1169 corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1170 the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1171 be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1172 background of the image.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1173
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1174 `:file FILE'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1175
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1176 Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1177 search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1178 building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1179 may be present in the image specification.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1180
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1181
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1182 *** Supported image types
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1183
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1184 **** XBM, iamge type `xbm'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1185
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1186 XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1187 properties supported are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1188
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1189 `:foreground FG'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1190
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1191 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1192 is the frame's foreground.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1193
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1194 `:background FG'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1195
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1196 BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1197 the frame's background color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1198
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1199 XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1200 case, the image specification must contain the following properties
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1201 instead of a `:file' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1202
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1203 `:width WIDTH'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1204
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1205 WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1206
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1207 `:height HEIGHT'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1208
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1209 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1210
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1211 `:data DATA'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1212
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1213 DATA must be either
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1214
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1215 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1216 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1217
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1218 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1219
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1220 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1221 bitmap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1222
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1223 **** XPM, image type `xpm'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1224
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1225 XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1226 `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1227 found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1228 `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1229
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1230 Additional image properties supported are:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1231
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1232 `:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1233
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1234 SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1235 name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1236 name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1237
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1238 XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1239 add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1240
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1241 `:data DATA'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1242
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1243 DATA must be a string containing an XPM image. The contents of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1244 string are of the same format as that of XPM files.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1245
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1246 The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1247 to display compressed images.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1248
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1249 **** PBM, image type `pbm'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1250
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1251 PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1252 mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1253 defined.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1254
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1255 **** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1256
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1257 Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1258 package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1259 properties defined.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1260
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1261 **** TIFF, image type `tiff'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1262
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1263 Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1264 package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1265 properties defined.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1266
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1267 **** GIF, image type `gif'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1268
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1269 Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1270 `libungif-4.1.0', or later.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1271
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1272 Additional image properties supported are:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1273
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1274 `:index INDEX'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1275
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1276 INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1277 multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1278
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1279 This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1280 For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1281 at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1282 every 0.1 seconds.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1283
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1284 (defun show-anim (file max)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1285 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1286 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1287
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1288 (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1289 (when (= idx max)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1290 (setq idx 0))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1291 (let ((img (create-image file nil :index idx)))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1292 (save-excursion
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1293 (set-buffer buffer)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1294 (goto-char (point-min))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1295 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1296 (insert-image img "x"))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1297 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1298
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1299 **** PNG, image type `png'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1300
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1301 Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1302 package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1303 properties defined.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1304
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1305 **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1306
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1307 Additional image properties supported are:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1308
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1309 `:pt-width WIDTH'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1310
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1311 WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1312 integer. This is an required property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1313
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1314 `:pt-height HEIGHT'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1315
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1316 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1317 must be an integer. This is an required property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1318
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1319 `:bounding-box BOX'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1320
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1321 BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1322 the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1323 files. This is an required property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1324
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1325 Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1326 lisp/gs.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1327
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1328 *** Lisp interface.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1329
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1330 The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1331 which are supported in the current configuration.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1332
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1333 Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1334 they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1335 The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1336 manually.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1337
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1338 *** Simplified image API, image.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1339
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1340 The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1341 creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1342 can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1343 define an image based on available image types. The functions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1344 `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1345 buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1346
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1347 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1348 ** Display margins.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1349
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1350 Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1351 and images.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1352
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1353 To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1354 `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1355 `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1356 obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1357 `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1358 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1359 of the display margins.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1360
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1361 You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1362 containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1363 one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1364 string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1365 in this file).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1366
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1367 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1368 ** Help display
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1369
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1370 Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1371 moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1372 `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1373 that have a `help-echo' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1374
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1375 The value of the `help-echo' property must be a string. For tool-bar
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1376 items, their key definition is used to determine the help to display.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1377 If their definition contains a property `:help FORM', FORM is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1378 evaluated to determine the help string. Otherwise, the caption of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1379 tool-bar item is used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1380
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1381 The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1382 help differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window causes the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1383 help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1384
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1385 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1386 ** Vertical fractional scrolling.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1387
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1388 The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1389 This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1390
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1391 The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1392 scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1393 The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1394 scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1395 used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1396
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1397 (global-set-key [A-down]
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1398 #'(lambda ()
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1399 (interactive)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1400 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1401 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1402 (global-set-key [A-up]
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1403 #'(lambda ()
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1404 (interactive)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1405 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1406 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1407
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1408 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1409 ** New hook `fontification-functions'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1410
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1411 Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1412 when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1413 variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1414 is called with one argument, POS.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1415
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1416 At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1417 characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1418 as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1419 property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1420 `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1421
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1422 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1423 ** Tool bar support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1424
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1425 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1426 parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1427 controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1428 suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1429 `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1430 automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1431
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1432 *** Tool bar item definitions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1433
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1434 Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1435 `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1436 where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1437
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1438 CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1439 evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1440 the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1441 property (see below).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1442
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1443 BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1444 binding are currently ignored.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1445
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1446 The following properties are recognized:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1447
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1448 `:enable FORM'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1449
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1450 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1451 or disabled.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1452
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1453 `:visible FORM'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1454
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1455 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1456
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1457 `:filter FUNCTION'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1458
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1459 FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1460 FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1461 used instead of BINDING to display this item.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1462
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1463 `:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1464
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1465 TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1466 and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1467
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1468 `:image IMAGES'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1469
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1470 IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1471 image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1472 meaning of each of the four elements:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1473
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1474 Index Use when item is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1475 ----------------------------------------
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1476 0 enabled and selected
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1477 1 enabled and deselected
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1478 2 disabled and selected
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1479 3 disabled and deselected
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1480
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1481 `:help HELP-STRING'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1482
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1483 Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1484 is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1485
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1486 *** Tool-bar-related variables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1487
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1488 If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1489 resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1490 than 1/4 of the frame's size.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1491
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1492 If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1493 raised when the mouse moves over them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1494
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1495 You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1496 `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1497 pixels. Default is 1.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1498
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1499 You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1500 `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1501
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1502 *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1503
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1504 You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1505 a tool bar item. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1506
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1507 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1508 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1509 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1510
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1511 is the original tool bar item definition, then
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1512
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1513 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1514
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1515 makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1516 item.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1517
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1518 ** Mode line changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1519
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1520 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1521 *** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1522
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1523 The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1524 that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1525 a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1526
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1527 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1528 a `local-map' text property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1529
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1530 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1531 that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1532
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1533 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1534 is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1535 `local-map' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1536
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1537 The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1538 properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1539 example.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1540
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1541 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1542 *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1543 variable mode-line-format to nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1544
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1545 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1546 *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1547
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1548 This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1549 `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1550 completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1551 `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1552 line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1553
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1554 The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1555 `header-line'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1556
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1557 The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1558 position in the header-line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1559
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1560 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1561 ** Text property `display'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1562
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1563 The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1564 also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1565 `display' property should be a display specification, as described
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1566 below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1567
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1568 *** Variable width and height spaces
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1569
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1570 To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1571 specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1572 `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1573 area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1574 marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1575 displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1576 simpler form STRETCH as property value.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1577
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1578 The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1579 PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1580 properties described below.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1581
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1582 The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1583 characters having the `display' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1584
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1585 - :width WIDTH
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1586
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1587 Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1588 character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1589
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1590 - :relative-width FACTOR
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1591
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1592 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1593 first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1594 same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1595 width of that character by FACTOR.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1596
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1597 - :align-to HPOS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1598
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1599 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1600 value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1601
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1602 Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1603
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1604 - :height HEIGHT
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1605
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1606 Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1607 normal line height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1608
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1609 - :relative-height FACTOR
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1610
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1611 The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1612 of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1613
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1614 - :ascent ASCENT
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1615
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1616 Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1617 used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1618 baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1619 equal to 100.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1620
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1621 You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1622
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1623 *** Images
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1624
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1625 A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1626 . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1627 in the display, the characters having this display specification in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1628 their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1629 the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1630 `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1631 area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1632 the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1633 as display specification.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1634
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1635 *** Other display properties
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1636
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1637 - :space-width FACTOR
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1638
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1639 Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1640 should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1641 integer or float.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1642
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1643 - :height HEIGHT
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1644
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1645 Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1646
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1647 If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1648 means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1649 the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1650 ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1651 a font is available counts as a step.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1652
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1653 If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1654 as tall as the frame's default font.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1655
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1656 If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1657 height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1658
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1659 Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1660 `height' bound to the current specified font height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1661
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1662 - :raise FACTOR
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1663
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1664 FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1665 font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1666 raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1667 amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1668 `:height' subproperty.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1669
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1670 *** Conditional display properties
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1671
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1672 All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1673 has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1674 applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1675 During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1676 the text having the `display' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1677
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1678 The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1679 `(:when t SPEC)'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1680
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1681 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1682 ** New menu separator types.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1683
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1684 Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1685 item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1686 treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1687 to specify other menu separator types.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1688
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1689 - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1690
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1691 No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1692 separator occurs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1693
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1694 - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1695
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1696 A single line in the menu's foreground color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1697
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1698 - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1699
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1700 A double line in the menu's foreground color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1701
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1702 - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1703
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1704 A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1705
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1706 - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1707
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1708 A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1709
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1710 - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1711
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1712 A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1713 displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1714
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1715 - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1716
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1717 A single line with 3D raised appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1718
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1719 - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1720
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1721 A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1722
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1723 - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1724
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1725 A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1726
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1727 - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1728
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1729 Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1730
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1731 - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1732
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1733 Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1734
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1735 - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1736
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1737 Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1738
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1739 - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1740
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1741 Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1742
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1743 Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1744 the corresponding single-line separators.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1745
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1746 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1747 ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1748
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1749 The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1750 `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1751 Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1752 that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1753 default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1754 default background is the background color of the frame, and the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1755 default foreground is black.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1756
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1757 The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1758 (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1759 `ScrollBarBackground').
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1760
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1761 Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1762 settings for scroll bar colors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1763
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1764 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1765 ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1766 display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1767
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1768 ---
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1769 ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1770 starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1771 on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1772 line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1773 the original window start.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1774
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1775 ---
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1776 ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1777 `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1778 now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1779
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1780 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1781 ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1782
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1783 A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1784 `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1785 windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1786 other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1787
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1788 The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1789 fixed-width and fixed-height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1790
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1791 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1792
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1793 A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1794 fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1795 window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1796 change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1797 temporarily to nil, for example
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1798
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1799 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1800 (enlarge-window 10))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1801
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1802 Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1803 or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1804
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1805 * Changes in Emacs 20.4
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1806
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1807 ** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1808
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1809 You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1810 Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1811 `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1812
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1813 If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1814 is the one that is used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1815
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1816 ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1817 the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1818 Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1819 separate from the command's regular output.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1820 Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1821 says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1822 In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1823 the buffer name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1824
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1825 When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1826 output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1827 it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1828 cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1829
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1830 ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1831 the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1832 is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1833 created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1834
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1835 ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1836 example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1837 match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1838 quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1839
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1840 ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1841 now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1842 if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1843 they never ignore case.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1844
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1845 ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1846 under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1847 applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1848 of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1849 just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1850 convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1851 part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1852
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1853 If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1854 the same format that was used in the file before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1855
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1856 You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1857 `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1858
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1859 ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1860 renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1861 This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1862
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1863 ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1864 The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1865 buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1866 your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1867 is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1868 end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1869 Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1870
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1871 The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1872 eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1873 control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1874 format. You can now customize these variables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1875
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1876 ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1877 filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1878 filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1879 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1880
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1881 ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1882 in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1883 windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1884
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1885 ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1886 dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1887 doesn't have any effect.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1888
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1889 ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1890 not one per buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1891
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1892 ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1893 use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1894 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1895
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1896 ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1897 To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1898 `auto-show-mode' command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1899
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1900 ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1901 avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1902 versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1903 choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1904 occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1905
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1906 ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1907 cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1908
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1909 ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1910 character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1911 feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1912
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1913 ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1914 the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1915 interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1916 and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1917
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1918 ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1919
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1920 The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1921 that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1922 one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1923 codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1924 set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1925
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1926 Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1927 from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1928
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1929 IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1930 equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1931 a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1932 `?' on other systems.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1933
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1934 IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1935 feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1936 Unix.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1937
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1938 Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1939 current codepage when it starts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1940
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1941 ** Mail changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1942
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1943 *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1944 default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1945 default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1946 sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1947 buffer-file-coding-system.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1948
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1949 You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1950 sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1951 mail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1952
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1953 *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1954 if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1955 Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1956 list of possible coding systems.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1957
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1958 ** CC Mode changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1959
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1960 *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1961 modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1962 longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1963 docstring for details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1964
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1965 *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1966 symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1967 found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1968 prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1969 lineup functions use this feature currently.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1970
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1971 *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1972 "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1973
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1974 *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1975 "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1976
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1977 *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1978 from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1979 symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1980 c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1981 anonymous classes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1982
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1983 *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1984 syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1985
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1986 *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1987 inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1988 support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1989 function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1990
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1991 *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1992 (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1993 brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1994 c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1995 (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1996
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1997 *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1998
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1999 *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2000
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2001 *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2002 for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2003
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2004 *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2005
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2006 *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2007 associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2008 This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2009 circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2010 class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2011
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2012 ** Gnus changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2013
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2014 *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2015 added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2016 Gnus manual for the full story.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2017
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2018 *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2019 before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2020 group, which is created automatically.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2021
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2022 *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2023 values.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2024
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2025 *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2026
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2027 *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2028 outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2029
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2030 *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2031 `C-u C-c C-c'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2032
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2033 *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2034
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2035 *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2036 re-highlighting of the article buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2037
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2038 *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2039
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2040 *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2041 Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2042
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2043 *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2044 `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2045
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2046 *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2047 control over simplification.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2048
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2049 *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2050
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2051 *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2052 limit.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2053
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2054 *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2055
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2056 *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2057
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2058 *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2059 If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2060 rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2061
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2062 *** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2063 `a' forces normal posting method.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2064
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2065 *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2066 -- `W d'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2067
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2068 *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2069 to a non-nil value.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2070
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2071 *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2072 where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2073
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2074 *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2075 has been added.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2076
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2077 *** A history of where mails have been split is available.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2078
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2079 *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2080
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2081 *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2082 `gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2083
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2084 *** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2085 `message-cite-original-without-signature'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2086
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2087 *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2088
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2089 *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2090 been added.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2091
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2092 *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2093 `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2094
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2095 *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2096 updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2097
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2098 *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2099
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2100 *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2101
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2102 *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2103
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2104 ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2105
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2106 *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2107 options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2108 nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2109
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2110 *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2111 TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2112 of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2113 TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2114 can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2115
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2116 *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2117 All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2118 but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2119 the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2120
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2121 *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2122 the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2123 buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2124 mismatch.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2125
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2126 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2127
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2128 *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2129 file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2130
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2131 *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2132 lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2133 characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2134 removed from the label.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2135
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2136 *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2137 a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2138
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2139 *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2140 customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2141
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2142 *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2143 `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2144 expressions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2145
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2146 *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2147
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2148 ** New/deleted modes and packages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2149
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2150 *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2151 SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2152
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2153 *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2154 editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2155 SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2156
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2157 *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2158 changes with a special face.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2159
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2160 *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2161 this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2162 Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2163
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2164 * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2165
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2166 ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2167 This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2168 conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2169 and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2170 check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2171
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2172 The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2173 Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2174 distribution when the config.bat script is run.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2175
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2176 ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2177 MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2178 controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2179 directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2180 Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2181 on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2182 string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2183 program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2184 printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2185
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2186 ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2187 output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2188 available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2189 input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2190 temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2191 program.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2192
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2193 An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2194 and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2195 programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2196 automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2197 as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2198 ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2199
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2200 ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2201 a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2202 MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2203 was not documented clearly before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2204
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2205 ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2206 This includes Tetris and Snake.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2207
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2208 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2209
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2210 ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2211 return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2212 They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2213 meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2214
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2215 ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2216 WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2217 and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2218
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2219 ** Changes in the file-attributes function.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2220
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2221 *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2222 It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2223
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2224 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2225 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2226 integers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2227
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2228 ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2229 files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2230 arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2231 file names and attributes are returned.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2232
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2233 ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2234 sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2235 accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2236 It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2237 returns the result.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2238
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2239 ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2240 to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2241
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2242 ** New functions for base64 conversion:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2243
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2244 The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2245 into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2246 performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2247 optionally.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2248
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2249 Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2250 job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2251
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2252 **
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2253 The new function process-running-child-p
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2254 will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2255 terminal to its own child process.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2256
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2257 ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2258 when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2259 to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2260 itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2261
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2262 ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2263 be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2264
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2265 ** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2266 :included is an alias for :visible.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2267
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2268 easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2269 easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2270 to move or copy menu entries.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2271
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2272 ** Multibyte editing changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2273
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2274 *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2275 an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2276 make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2277 work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2278 char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2279 (setq char (sref str idx)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2280 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2281 The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2282
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2283 If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2284 (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2285 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2286
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2287 *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2288 region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2289 deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2290
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2291 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2292
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2293 This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2294 across the boundary.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2295
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2296 *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2297 `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2298 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2299 contains 8-bit characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2300 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2301 contains invalid characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2302
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2303 *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2304 text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2305 preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2306 text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2307 way.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2308
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2309 *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2310 If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2311 end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2312 prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2313
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2314 *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2315 compose Thai characters in a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2316
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2317 ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2318 argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2319 for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2320 menus should always use the third argument.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2321
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2322 ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2323 read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2324 arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2325 input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2326
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2327 ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2328 of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2329 programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2330 inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2331
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2332 ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2333 the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2334 returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2335 echo area contents.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2336
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2337 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2338
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2339 ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2340 NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2341 requested feature cannot be loaded.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2342
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2343 ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2344 foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2345 means to clear out that attribute.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2346
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2347 ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2348 gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2349
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2350 ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2351 read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2352 unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2353 end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2354
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2355 ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2356 the gap of the current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2357
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2358 ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2359 to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2360 current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2361
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2362 ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2363 facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2364 These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2365 it back in after any modifications have been made.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2366
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2367 * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2368
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2369 ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2370 the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2371 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2372 directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2373 subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2374
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2375 Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2376 names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2377 Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2378 which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2379 these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2380
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2381 Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2382 starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2383 time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2384
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2385 This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2386 Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2387 to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2388 subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2389 `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2390 results.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2391
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2392 ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2393 GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2394 that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2395 fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2396
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2397 * Changes in Emacs 20.3
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2398
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2399 ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2400 including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2401 it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2402 perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2403
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2404 ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2405 specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2406 region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2407 further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2408 command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2409 within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2410 are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2411 region.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2412
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2413 In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2414 selective undo.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2415
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2416 ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2417 unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2418 buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2419 effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2420 Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2421
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2422 The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2423 though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2424 -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2425 load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2426
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2427 ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2428 no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2429 enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2430 something that most users not do.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2431
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2432 ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2433 operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2434 The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2435 applications.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2436
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2437 C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2438 pasting operations.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2439
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2440 ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2441 setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2442 like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2443 printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2444 `ps-printer-name'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2445
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2446 ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2447 minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2448 any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2449 except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2450 incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2451 hits a new word.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2452
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2453 Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2454 Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2455 to be confused by TeX commands.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2456
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2457 You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2458 correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2459 clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2460 of various alternative replacements and actions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2461
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2462 Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2463 the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2464 corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2465 alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2466 flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2467
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2468 Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2469 flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2470
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2471 ** Changes in input method usage.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2472
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2473 Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2474 the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2475 respectively.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2476
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2477 You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2478
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2479 If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2480 of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2481
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2482 The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2483 that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2484
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2485 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2486
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2487 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2488
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2489 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2490 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2491
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2492 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2493 given in the following case:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2494 o When you are using a complex input method.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2495 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2496
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2497 If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2498 input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2499 and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2500 setting it to t is helpful.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2501
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2502 The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2503
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2504 In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2505 keys:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2506 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2507 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2508 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2509 These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2510 environment.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2511
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2512 ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2513 names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2514 minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2515 get
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2516
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2517 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2518
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2519 which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2520
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2521 Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2522 Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2523
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2524 ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2525 at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2526 its owner and group.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2527
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2528 ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2529 Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2530
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2531 ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2532 contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2533
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2534 ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2535 which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2536 in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2537 by the left edge of the rectangle.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2538
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2539 ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2540 increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2541 C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2542 for writing keyboard macros.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2543
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2544 ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2545 files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2546 frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2547 the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2548 additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2549 info.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2550
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2551 ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2552
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2553 ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2554 query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2555 contents only.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2556
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2557 ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2558 confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2559 the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2560 says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2561
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2562 ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2563 non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2564 literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2565
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2566 ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2567 now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2568 Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2569 inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2570
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2571 ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2572 failure if the command produces no output.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2573
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2574 ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2575 manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2576 the mouse.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2577
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2578 ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2579 mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2580 function and variable names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2581
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2582 ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2583 reading specific files. This has higher priority than
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2584 file-coding-system-alist.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2585
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2586 ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2587 t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2588 converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2589 the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2590 according to the current fontset.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2591
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2592 ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2593
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2594 The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2595 that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2596 nonascii-insert-offset.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2597
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2598 For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2599 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2600 nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2601 characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2602
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2603 ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2604 an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2605
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2606 ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2607 letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2608
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2609 ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2610 are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2611 command keys.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2612
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2613 ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2614 user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2615
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2616 Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2617 user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2618 all variables that have documentation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2619
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2620 ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2621 shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2622 that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2623 minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2624 it should show; the default is 20.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2625
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2626 Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2627 the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2628 of your input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2629
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2630 ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2631 all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2632 recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2633 argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2634 the customizable options which were changed since that version.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2635 Newly added options are included as well.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2636
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2637 If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2638 then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2639 for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2640
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2641 This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2642 Customize menu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2643
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2644 ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2645 the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2646
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2647 ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2648 buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2649 invoked.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2650
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2651 ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2652 that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2653 The default is 1.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2654
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2655 ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2656 syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2657 new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2658 (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2659 sensibly.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2660
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2661 ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2662
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2663 ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2664 value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2665 two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2666
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2667 ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2668 reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2669 for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2670 every night.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2671
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2672 ** All you need to do, to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2673 the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2674
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2675 ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2676 read and post multi-lingual articles.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2677
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2678 ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2679 doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2680 be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2681 outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2682 the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2683 made invisible again.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2684
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2685 ** Mail reading and sending changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2686
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2687 *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2688 the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2689 changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2690 toggle.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2691
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2692 *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2693 now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2694 summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2695 the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2696 rmail-default-body-file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2697
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2698 *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2699 longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2700 handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2701
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2702 *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2703 it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2704 is evaluated to insert the signature.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2705
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2706 *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2707 outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2708 handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2709 putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2710 transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2711 especially interested in trying feedmail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2712
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2713 feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2714 feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2715 provided by feedmail are:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2716
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2717 **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2718 stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2719 there is also a queue for draft messages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2720
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2721 **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2722 be prompted for confirmation
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2723
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2724 **** does smart filling of address headers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2725
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2726 **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2727 the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2728 can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2729
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2730 **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2731 the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2732 /usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2733 function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2734
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2735 ** Dired changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2736
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2737 *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2738 files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2739
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2740 *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2741 run Dired on the directory name at point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2742
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2743 *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2744 files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2745 for a specified regexp.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2746
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2747 ** VC Changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2748
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2749 *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2750 conveniently.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2751
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2752 *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2753 faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2754 Dired.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2755
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2756 VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2757 directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2758 listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2759 currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2760
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2761 You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2762 then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2763 vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2764 control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2765 on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2766
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2767 All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2768 is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2769 `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2770 the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2771 `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2772
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2773 The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2774 toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2775 VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2776 `* l', to mark all files currently locked.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2777
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2778 Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2779 ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2780 command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2781
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2782 *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2783 file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2784 session to resolve them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2785
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2786 Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2787 resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2788 contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2789 uses as well).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2790
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2791 *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2792 command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2793 you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2794 either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2795 branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2796 If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2797 using ediff.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2798
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2799 ** Changes in Font Lock
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2800
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2801 *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2802 are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2803 use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2804 unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2805 compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2806
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2807 ** Frame name display changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2808
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2809 *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2810 frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2811 raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2812 when many frames are invisible or iconified.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2813
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2814 *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2815 frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2816 menu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2817
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2818 ** Comint (subshell) changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2819
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2820 *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2821 subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2822 with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2823
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2824 *** There are new commands in Comint mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2825
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2826 C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2827 that is, the line after the last line you got.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2828 You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2829
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2830 C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2831 send the current line together with the following line, when you send
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2832 the following line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2833
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2834 C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2835 which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2836 previously sent input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2837
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2838 C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2839 it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2840 as the search string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2841
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2842 *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2843 automatically in compilation-mode windows.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2844
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2845 ** C mode changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2846
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2847 *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2848 and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2849 assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2850 definition.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2851
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2852 *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2853 (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2854 Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2855 style is still the default however.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2856
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2857 *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2858
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2859 *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2860 are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2861 them. They do not have key bindings by default.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2862
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2863 *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2864 and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2865
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2866 *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2867 namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2868
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2869 *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2870 makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2871
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2872 *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2873 c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2874
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2875 *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2876 should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2877 package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2878 variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2879
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2880 ** Changes to hippie-expand.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2881
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2882 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2883 non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2884 which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2885
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2886 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2887 non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2888 expanding dynamically.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2889
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2890 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2891 non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2892
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2893 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2894 non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2895 this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2896 expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2897
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2898 *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2899
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2900 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2901
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2902 *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2903 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2904 automatic key generation. This replaces variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2905 bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2906 against the first word in the title.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2907
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2908 *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2909 capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2910 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2911 lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2912 lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2913 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2914
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2915 *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2916 generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2917 replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2918 bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2919
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2920 ** Changes in vcursor.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2921
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2922 *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2923 and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2924 variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2925 entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2926 `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2927 in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2928
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2929 *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2930 Editing group once the package is loaded.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2931
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2932 *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2933 generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2934 vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2935
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2936 *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2937 vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2938
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2939 ** Ispell changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2940
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2941 *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2942 buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2943 are identified by syntax tables in effect.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2944
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2945 *** Generic region skipping implemented.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2946 A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2947 and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2948 defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2949 include:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2950
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2951 o URLs are automatically skipped
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2952 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2953
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2954 *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2955
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2956 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2957
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2958 RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2959 large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2960 re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2961 section `Optimizations' in the manual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2962
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2963 *** New recursive parser.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2964
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2965 The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2966 entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2967 recursive parser scans the individual files.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2968
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2969 *** Parsing only part of a document.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2970
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2971 Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2972 partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2973 the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2974
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2975 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2976
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2977 *** Storing parsing information in a file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2978
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2979 This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2980
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2981 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2982
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2983 *** Using multiple selection buffers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2984
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2985 If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2986 for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2987
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2988 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2989
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2990 *** References to external documents.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2991
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2992 The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2993 documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2994 documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2995 macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2996 RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2997 the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2998 The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2999
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3000 *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3001
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3002 The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3003 and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3004
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3005 Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3006 the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3007
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3008 *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3009
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3010 The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3011 buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3012
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3013 *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3014
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3015 The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3016 contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3017 `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3018 have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3019 enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3020 at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3021 more.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3022
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3023 *** Support for the varioref package
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3024
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3025 The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3026
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3027 *** New hooks
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3028
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3029 Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3030 and citations are created. These hooks are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3031 `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3032 `reftex-format-cite-function'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3033
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3034 *** Citations outside LaTeX
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3035
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3036 The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3037 a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3038
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3039 *** Short context is no longer fontified.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3040
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3041 The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3042 fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3043 fontified, use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3044
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3045 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3046
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3047 ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3048 With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3049 the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3050 directories that contain the same file name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3051
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3052 Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3053 Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3054 file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3055 Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3056 have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3057 names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3058 directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3059 directory.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3060
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3061 ** New modes and packages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3062
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3063 *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3064 It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3065 it, but some do not.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3066
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3067 *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3068 code.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3069
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3070 *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3071 current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3072 around in a buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3073
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3074 Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3075
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3076 *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3077 uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3078 be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3079 established system of notation similar to Chess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3080
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3081 *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3082 documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3083 guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3084
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3085 *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3086 available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3087 system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3088 simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3089 functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3090 the like.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3091
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3092 *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3093 identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3094
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3095 *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3096 within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3097 used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3098 the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3099
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3100 *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3101
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3102 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3103 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3104 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3105 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3106 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3107 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3108 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3109 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3110 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3111 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3112 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3113
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3114 Platform-specific modes:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3115
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3116 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3117 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3118 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3119 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3120 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3121 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3122 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3123 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3124 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3125
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3126 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3127
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3128 ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3129 use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3130 That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3131 Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3132
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3133 Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3134 you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3135 consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3136
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3137 ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3138 and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3139 specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3140 searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3141
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3142 ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3143 multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3144 character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3145 environment.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3146
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3147 ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3148 take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3149 string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3150 current input method for reading this one event.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3151
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3152 ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3153 now control whether to output certain characters as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3154 backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3155 non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3156 characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3157 in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3158
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3159 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3160
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3161 ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3162 of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3163
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3164 ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3165 in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3166 always increases point by 1.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3167
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3168 The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3169 considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3170
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3171 See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3172
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3173 ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3174 Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3175 default value changed. For example,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3176
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3177 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3178 :type 'integer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3179 :group 'foo
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3180 :version "20.3")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3181
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3182 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3183 :version "20.3")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3184
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3185 If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3186 default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3187 is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3188 `:version' in the top level group.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3189
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3190 This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3191
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3192 ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3193 starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3194
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3195 However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3196 symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3197 support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3198 to themselves.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3199
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3200 If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3201 this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3202 values whatever.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3203
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3204 ** There is a new debugger command, R.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3205 It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3206 in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3207
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3208 ** Frame-local variables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3209
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3210 You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3211 the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3212 local bindings for that variable.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3213
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3214 These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3215 frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3216 modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3217 parameter name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3218
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3219 Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3220 Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3221 active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3222 that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3223
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3224 It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3225 clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3226 very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3227 through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3228
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3229 ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3230 "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3231 evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3232 makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3233 See the documentation in sregex.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3234
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3235 ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3236 is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3237 parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3238 The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3239
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3240 ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3241 If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3242
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3243 ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3244 known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3245 define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3246
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3247 ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3248 when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3249 it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3250 history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3251
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3252 The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3253 return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3254 empty input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3255
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3256 ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3257 for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3258 `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3259 Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3260 `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3261
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3262 ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3263 echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3264 a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3265 default password to use if the user enters nothing.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3266
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3267 ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3268 specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3269 function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3270 place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3271 non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3272
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3273 ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3274 If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3275 up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3276 end of the window, even if this requires computation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3277
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3278 ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3279 which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3280 If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3281
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3282 ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3283 holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3284 was directed to display this buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3285
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3286 ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3287 with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3288 describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3289 other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3290 set-window-configuration.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3291
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3292 ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3293 window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3294 positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3295 windows and the choice of buffers to display.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3296
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3297 ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3298 override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3299 look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3300
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3301 If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3302 non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3303 map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3304
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3305 minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3306 and it is meant to be set by major modes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3307
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3308 ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3309 except that it discards all text properties from the result.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3310
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3311 ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3312 USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3313 floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3314
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3315 ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3316 to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3317 in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3318 it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3319
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3320 ** Menu changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3321
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3322 *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3323 keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3324 better supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3325
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3326 The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3327 a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3328 you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3329 can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3330 then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3331
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3332 *** A new format for menu items is supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3333
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3334 In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3335 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3336 defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3337 starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3338
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3339 The format is:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3340 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3341 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3342 where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3343 string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3344 The supported properties include
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3345
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3346 :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3347 item is enabled.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3348 :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3349 item should appear in the menu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3350 :filter FILTER-FN
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3351 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3352 which will be REAL-BINDING.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3353 It should return a binding to use instead.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3354 :keys DESCRIPTION
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3355 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3356 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3357 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3358 :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3359 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3360 keyboard binding.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3361 :key-sequence nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3362 This means that the command normally has no
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3363 keyboard equivalent.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3364 :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3365 :button (TYPE . SELECTED)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3366 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3367 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3368 value says whether this button is currently selected.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3369
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3370 Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3371 Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3372
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3373 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3374
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3375 ** New event types
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3376
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3377 *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3378 mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3379 corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3380 which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3381
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3382 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3383
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3384 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3385 same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3386 indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3387 negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3388 the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3389 forward, away from the user.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3390
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3391 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3392
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3393 *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3394 files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3395 and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3396 filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3397 loaded into Emacs. The format is:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3398
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3399 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3400
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3401 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3402 same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3403 that were dragged and dropped.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3404
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3405 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3406
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3407 ** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3408
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3409 *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3410 any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3411 to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3412
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3413 *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3414 can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3415 that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3416
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3417 *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3418 in Emacs 19 and before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3419
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3420 The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3421 The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3422
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3423 *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3424 buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3425 unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3426 representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3427
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3428 This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3429 as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3430 viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3431 one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3432 will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3433
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3434 This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3435 representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3436 (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3437 consistent with the new representation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3438
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3439 *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3440 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3441 about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3442 however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3443
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3444 The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3445 nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3446 using the table nonascii-translation-table.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3447
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3448 *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3449 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3450 representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3451
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3452 The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3453 loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3454 is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3455
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3456 *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3457 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3458
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3459 *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3460 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3461
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3462 *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3463 portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3464 so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3465 You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3466
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3467 *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3468 it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3469
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3470 *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3471 convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3472 buffer or string being searched.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3473
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3474 One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3475 [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3476 searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3477 searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3478 obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3479 you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3480 expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3481
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3482 *** Structure of coding system changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3483
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3484 All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3485 by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3486 which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3487 as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3488 vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3489 your own alias name of a coding system by the function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3490 define-coding-system-alias.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3491
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3492 The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3493 the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3494 access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3495 pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3496 character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3497 safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3498 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3499 `iso-8859-1'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3500
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3501 Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3502 The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3503 coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3504 (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3505
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3506 Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3507 also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3508 are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3509 the other character sets and read it back correctly.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3510
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3511 *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3512 proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3513 This function requires a user interaction.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3514
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3515 *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3516 find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3517 select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3518 systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3519 a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3520 select-safe-coding-system.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3521
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3522 *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3523 decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3524 last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3525 was done.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3526
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3527 *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3528 used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3529 coding systems used by some specific language environment.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3530
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3531 *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3532 return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3533 characters are found, they now return a list of single element
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3534 `undecided' or its subsidiaries.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3535
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3536 *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3537 coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3538 coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3539 converted.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3540
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3541 *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3542 coding system for communicating with other X clients.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3543
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3544 *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3545 character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3546 character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3547 each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3548 either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3549 range of characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3550
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3551 *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3552 Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3553
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3554 *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3555 in the current buffer at position POS.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3556
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3557 *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3558 input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3559 function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3560 character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3561 event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3562 binding input-method-function to nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3563
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3564 The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3565 method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3566 input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3567 the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3568 not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3569
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3570 The input method function is not called when reading the second and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3571 subsequent events of a key sequence.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3572
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3573 *** You can customize any language environment by using
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3574 set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3575
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3576 The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3577 customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3578 instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3579 environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3580 exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3581
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3582 * Changes in Emacs 20.1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3583
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3584 ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3585 options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3586 at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3587 tree structure.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3588
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3589 M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3590 user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3591
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3592 With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3593 session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3594 in your .emacs file.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3595
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3596 ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3597 You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3598
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3599 ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3600 This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3601
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3602 ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3603 immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3604 kills the region.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3605
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3606 The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3607 delete the character before point, as usual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3608
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3609 ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3610 on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3611 by setting search-highlight to nil.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3612
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3613 ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3614 insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3615 the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3616 onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3617 history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3618 past.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3619
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3620 ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3621 This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3622 in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3623 TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3624 makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3625
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3626 As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3627 and is an alias for it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3628
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3629 If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3630 use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3631
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3632 ** Scrolling changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3633
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3634 *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3635 position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3636
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3637 In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3638 on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3639 where it started.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3640
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3641 *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3642 move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3643 screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3644 does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3645
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3646 *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3647 top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3648 comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3649 recenters the window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3650
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3651 ** International character set support (MULE)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3652
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3653 Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3654 including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3655 Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3656 Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3657 features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3658 MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3659
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3660 Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3661 coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3662 character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3663 variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3664 into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3665
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3666 Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3667 generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3668 supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3669 language, to make it possible to type them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3670
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3671 The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3672 character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3673
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3674 The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3675 to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3676
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3677 You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3678
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3679 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3680
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3681 Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3682 characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3683 argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3684 already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3685 characters for their work until they want to change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3686
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3687 *** Input methods
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3688
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3689 An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3690 specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3691 has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3692 the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3693 support several input methods.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3694
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3695 The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3696 another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3697 work.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3698
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3699 A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3700 characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3701 composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3702 consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3703 sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3704 letter.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3705
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3706 The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3707 by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3708 First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3709 marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3710 mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3711
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3712 None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3713 they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3714 phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3715 converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3716
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3717 Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3718 word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3719 typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3720 the first guess is wrong.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3721
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3722 *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3723 turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3724
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3725 If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3726 byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3727 they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3728 the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3729
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3730 However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3731 use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3732 includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3733 translate automatically to and from either one.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3734
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3735 *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3736
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3737 Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3738 file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3739 sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3740 what you want.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3741
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3742 If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3743 example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3744 system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3745 multibyte characters in that buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3746
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3747 If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3748 character conversion as well.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3749
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3750 *** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3751
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3752 A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3753 Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3754 requires using many fonts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3755
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3756 Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3757 collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3758
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3759 A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3760 the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3761 have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3762 you would use a font.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3763
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3764 If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3765 specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3766 display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3767
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3768 The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3769 (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3770 characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3771 or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3772 and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3773
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3774 *** Defining fontsets.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3775
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3776 Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3777 chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3778 with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3779
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3780 Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3781 of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3782 `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3783 standard fontset are created automatically.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3784
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3785 If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3786 argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3787 FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3788 with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3789 name is `fontset-startup'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3790
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3791 Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3792 The resource value should have this form:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3793 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3794 FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3795 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3796 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3797 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3798 The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3799 of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3800 CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3801 FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3802
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3803 Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3804 last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3805 You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3806
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3807 For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3808 font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3809 following resource,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3810 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3811 the font for ASCII is generated as below:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3812 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3813 Here is the substitution rule:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3814 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3815 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3816 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3817 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3818 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3819
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3820 The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3821 fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3822 that function explicitly to create a fontset.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3823
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3824 With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3825 like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3826 name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3827 fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3828 fontsets.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3829
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3830 *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3831 defaults for a particular choice of language.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3832
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3833 Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3834 method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3835 visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3836 already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3837 language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3838 system for new files that you create.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3839
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3840 It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3841 set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3842 whole Emacs session.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3843
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3844 For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3845 chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3846 with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3847
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3848 *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3849 specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3850 specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3851 the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3852 coding systems that Emacs supports.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3854 *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3855 lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3856 This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3857 After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3858 is used for *the immediately following command*.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3859
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3860 So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3861 write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3862
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3863 If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3864 then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3865
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3866 For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3867 visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3868
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3869 *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3870 construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3871 to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3872 specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3873 of the file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3874
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3875 *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3876 the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3877 code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3878 translated into that character code.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3879
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3880 This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3881 various countries to support the languages of those countries.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3882
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3883 By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3884
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3885 *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3886 the coding system for keyboard input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3887
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3888 Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3889 with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3890 some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3891
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3892 By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3893
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3894 Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3895 input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3896 translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3897 to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3898 designed to work with terminals.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3899
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3900 *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3901 specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3902 This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3903 has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3904 translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3905 in the corresponding buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3906
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3907 By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3908
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3909 *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3910 to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3911 It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3912
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3913 *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3914 an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3915 command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3916 want to use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3917
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3918 C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3919 method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3920
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3921 *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3922 layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3923 remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3924 which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3925
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3926 *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3927 the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3928 related information.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3929
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3930 *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3931 HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3932 scripts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3933
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3934 *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3935 information about the support for a particular language.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3936 You specify the language as an argument.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3937
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3938 *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3939 the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3940 first dash.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3941
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3942 A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3943 (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3944 whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3945 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3946
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3947 A alternativnyj (Russian)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3948 B big5 (Chinese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3949 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3950 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3951 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3952 E euc-japan (Japanese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3953 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3954 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3955 K euc-korea (Korean)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3956 R koi8 (Russian)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3957 Q tibetan
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3958 S shift_jis (Japanese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3959 T lao
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3960 T tis620 (Thai)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3961 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3962 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3963 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3964 v viqr (Vietnamese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3965 z hz (Chinese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3966
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3967 When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3968 two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3969 coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3970 keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3971
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3972 *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3973 conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3974
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3975 When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3976 into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3977 rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3978 Rmail files themselves.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3979
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3980 *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3981 conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3982
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3983 Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3984 for sending mail:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3985
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3986 - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3987 - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3988 - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3989 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3990 - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3991
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3992 *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3993 to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3994 Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3995 translations.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3996
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3997 ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3998 of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3999 insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4000 without any conversion.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4001
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4002 ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4003 You can now specify any number of octal digits.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4004 RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4005 any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4006
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4007 ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4008 functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4009
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4010 Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4011 Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4012
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4013 Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4014 mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4015
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4016 ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4017 complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4018 in the buffer before point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4019
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4020 With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4021 symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4022 you are using.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4023
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4024 With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4025 just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4026
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4027 ** File locking works with NFS now.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4028
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4029 The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4030 in the same directory as FILENAME.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4031
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4032 This means that collision detection between two different machines now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4033 works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4034 can become a bottleneck.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4035
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4036 The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4037 does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4038 create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4039 file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4040 rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4041 so useful that the change is worth while.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4042
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4043 When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4044 are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4045 collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4046 tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4047
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4048 ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4049 it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4050 show-paren-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4051
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4052 ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4053 selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4054 delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4055
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4056 ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4057 within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4058 complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4059
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4060 ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4061 it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4062 set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4063
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4064 ** Changes in View mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4065
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4066 *** Several new commands are available in View mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4067 Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4068
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4069 *** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4070 view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4071
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4072 *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4073 previous state.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4074
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4075 *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4076 scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4077
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4078 *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4079 non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4080 not just the selected window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4081
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4082 *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4083 read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4084 turns View mode on or off.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4085
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4086 *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4087 how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4088 delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4089
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4090 ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4091 now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4092
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4093 ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4094 has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4095 presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4096 which version to compare with.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4097
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4098 ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4099 blocks if a match is inside the block.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4100
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4101 The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4102 is outside the block. By customizing the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4103 isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4104 shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4105
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4106 By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4107 of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4108 blocks, all of them or none.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4109
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4110 ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4111 current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4112 confirmation first.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4113
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4114 ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4115 now changes the major mode according to that file name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4116 However, the mode will not be changed if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4117 (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4118 (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4119 not suitable for ordinary files, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4120 (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4121
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4122 This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4123
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4124 However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4125 these commands do not change the major mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4126
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4127 ** M-x occur changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4128
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4129 *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4130 it performs a case-sensitive search.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4131
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4132 *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4133 if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4134 using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4135
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4136 ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4137 in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4138 window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4139 that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4140 buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4141
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4142 ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4143 after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4144 appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4145 come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4146
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4147 ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4148 selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4149 buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4150
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4151 ** Outline mode changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4152
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4153 *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4154
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4155 *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4156
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4157 ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4158 you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4159 Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4160 was already active.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4161
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4162 The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4163 unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4164 get confused by it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4165
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4166 If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4167 set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4168
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4169 ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4170
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4171 *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4172 conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4173 character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4174 including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4175
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4176 The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4177 mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4178 copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4179
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4180 *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4181 are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4182 values.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4183
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4184 `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4185 case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4186 `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4187 case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4188
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4189 ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4190 certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4191 can be. The default value is 30.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4192
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4193 ** Changes in Mail mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4194
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4195 *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4196 Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4197 composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4198 `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4199 `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4200 behavior.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4201
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4202 C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4203 compose-mail-other-frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4204
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4205 *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4206 the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4207 replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4208 buffer that shows the original message.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4209
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4210 *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4211 with separator lines around the contents.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4212
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4213 *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4214 in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4215 definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4216 need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4217
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4218 *** New features in the mail-complete command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4219
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4220 **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4221 for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4222 controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4223 Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4224
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4225 **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4226 to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4227 /etc/passwd.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4228
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4229 **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4230 to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4231 /etc/passwd.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4232
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4233 ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4234 special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4235 directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4236 reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4237
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4238 Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4239 when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4240 be taken to be magic.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4241
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4242 ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4243 files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4244 available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4245
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4246 M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4247 (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4248
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4249 ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4250 suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4251
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4252 In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4253
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4254 new key dired.el binding old key
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4255 ------- ---------------- -------
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4256 * c dired-change-marks c
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4257 * m dired-mark m
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4258 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4259 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4260 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4261 * u dired-unmark u
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4262 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4263 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4264 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4265 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4266 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4267 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4268
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4269 ** Rmail changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4270
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4271 *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4272 saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4273 chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4274 each time you run it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4275
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4276 *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4277 whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4278
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4279 *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4280 messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4281 means to move in the opposite direction.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4282
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4283 *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4284 you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4285
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4286 *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4287 just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4288 It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4289 can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4290 for output.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4291
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4292 ** Gnus changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4293
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4294 *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4295
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4296 *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4297 Gnus.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4298
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4299 *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4300 `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4301
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4302 *** Article washing status can be displayed in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4303 article mode line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4304
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4305 *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4306
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4307 *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4308
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4309 (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4310
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4311 *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4312 are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4313 `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4314
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4315 *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4316
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4317 *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4318
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4319 *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4320 See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4321
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4322 *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4323 Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4324 used to pick articles.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4325
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4326 *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4327 another have been added.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4328
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4329 `M-x gnus-change-server'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4330
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4331 *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4332 generating lines in buffers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4333
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4334 *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4335 `M-C-_'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4336
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4337 *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4338
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4339 *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4340
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4341 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4342
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4343 *** Scores can be decayed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4344
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4345 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4346
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4347 *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4348 Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4349
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4350 *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4351 the native server.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4352
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4353 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4354
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4355 *** A new command for reading collections of documents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4356 (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4357
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4358 *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4359
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4360 *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4361 even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4362
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4363 *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4364 (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4365
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4366 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4367 a group.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4368
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4369 *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4370 sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4371
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4372 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4373
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4374 *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4375
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4376 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4377
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4378 *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4379
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4380 Use the `Y c' command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4381
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4382 *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4383
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4384 *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4385
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4386 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4387
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4388 *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4389 from incoming mail before saving the mail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4390
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4391 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4392
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4393 *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4394
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4395 *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4396 the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4397
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4398 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4399
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4400 Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4401 and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4402 from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4403 hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4404 this issue.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4405
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4406 Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4407 automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4408 particular news group. This can be done by:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4409
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4410 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4411
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4412 Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4413 of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4414 "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4415 system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4416 for reading and posting).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4417
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4418 CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4419 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4420 Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4421 newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4422 there.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4423
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4424 Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4425 default. Here are some of these default settings:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4426
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4427 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4428 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4429 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4430 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4431 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4432
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4433 When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4434 the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4435
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4436 ** CC mode changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4437
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4438 *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4439 code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4440 values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4441 this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4442 Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4443 loaded.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4444
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4445 If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4446 Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4447 style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4448 share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4449 c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4450 must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4451
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4452 *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4453 of the current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4454
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4455 *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4456 it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4457 of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4458
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4459 *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4460 style that the Python developers like.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4461
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4462 *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4463 This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4464 just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4465
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4466 ** VC Changes [new]
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4467
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4468 ** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4469 name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4470 directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4471
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4472 This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4473 master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4474 developers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4475
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4476 You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4477 RET in a buffer visiting that file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4478
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4479 *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4480 other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4481 writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4482 calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4483
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4484 *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4485 version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4486
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4487 ** Calendar changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4488
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4489 A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4490 of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4491 for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4492
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4493 ** ps-print changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4494
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4495 There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4496
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4497 *** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4498
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4499 The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4500 formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4501 `a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4502 `ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4503 It defaults to `letter'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4504 If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4505
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4506 The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4507 of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4508 non-nil means "landscape" mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4509
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4510 The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4511 It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4512 It defaults to 1.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4513
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4514 *** Horizontal layout
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4515
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4516 The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4517 `ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4518 All are measured in points.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4519
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4520 *** Vertical layout
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4521
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4522 The vertical layout is determined by the variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4523 `ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4524 All are measured in points.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4525
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4526 *** Headers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4527
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4528 If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4529 `ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4530 margin above the text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4531
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4532 If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4533 framing box is printed around the header.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4534
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4535 The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4536 `ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4537
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4538 The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4539 `ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4540 `ps-header-font-size'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4541
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4542 *** Font managing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4543
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4544 The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4545 used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4546 `ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4547 elements to this alist.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4548
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4549 The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4550 for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4551
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4552 ** hideshow changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4553
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4554 *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4555 C++, ; for lisp).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4556
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4557 *** Support for java-mode added.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4558
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4559 *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4560 in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4561
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4562 *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4563 the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4564 way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4565
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4566 *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4567 robust and a lot faster.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4568
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4569 *** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4570
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4571 *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4572 to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4573 documentation for more details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4574
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4575 ** Changes in Enriched mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4576
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4577 *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4578 filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4579 of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4580 use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4581 the next time unless the fill-column is different.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4582
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4583 *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4584 distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4585 as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4586 as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4587
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4588 ** Font Lock mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4589
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4590 *** Custom support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4591
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4592 The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4593 font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4594 faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4595 group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4596 your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4597 consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4598
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4599 You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4600
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4601 *** Maximum decoration
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4602
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4603 Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4604 default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4605 of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4606 supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4607 to get the old behavior.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4608
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4609 *** New support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4610
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4611 Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4612
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4613 Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4614 support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4615
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4616 *** Configurable support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4617
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4618 Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4619 additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4620 c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4621 java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4622 list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4623 of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4624 convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4625
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4626 Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4627 way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4628 it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4629
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4630 *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4631
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4632 You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4633 highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4634 for any mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4635
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4636 For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4637
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4638 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4639
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4640 in your ~/.emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4641
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4642 *** New faces
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4643
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4644 Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4645 font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4646 distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4647 to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4648
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4649 *** Changes to fast-lock support mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4650
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4651 The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4652 cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4653 same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4654
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4655 *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4656
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4657 The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4658 according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4659 the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4660 non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4661 refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4662 the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4663 Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4664
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4665 This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4666 For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4667 this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4668 refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4669 containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4670 the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4671
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4672 As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4673
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4674 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4675 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4676 Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4677 new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4678
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4679 If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4680 settings.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4681
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4682 ** Ada mode changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4683
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4684 *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4685 If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4686 procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4687 you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4688 stubs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4689
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4690 *** There are two new commands:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4691 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4692 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4693
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4694 The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4695 `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4696 `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4697
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4698 *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4699 is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4700 Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4701
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4702 *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4703 formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4704 places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4705 space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4706
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4707 ** Scheme mode changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4708
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4709 *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4710 mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4711 for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4712 with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4713 have any effect.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4714
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4715 If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4716 still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4717 scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4718 variables as buffer-local variables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4719
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4720 *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4721 Use M-x dsssl-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4722
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4723 ** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4724 it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4725 buffer in Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4726
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4727 ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4728 constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4729 (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4730
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4731 ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4732 which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4733 the current defun.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4734
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4735 ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4736 following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4737
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4738 ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4739 and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4740 necessary).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4741
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4742 ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4743 if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4744 these register values no longer become completely useless.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4745 If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4746 asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4747 it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4748
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4749 ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4750 example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4751 be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4752 you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4753
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4754 You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4755 variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4756 file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4757 revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4758 only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4759
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4760 ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4761 since it applies only to the current frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4762
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4763 ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4764 file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4765 and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4766
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4767 This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4768 multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4769 variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4770 tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4771 instead of just the file you are editing.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4772
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4773 ** RefTeX mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4774
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4775 RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4776 and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4777 different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4778 multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4779 turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4780
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4781 C-c ( reftex-label
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4782 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4783 knows which kind of label is needed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4784
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4785 C-c ) reftex-reference
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4786 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4787 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4788
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4789 C-c [ reftex-citation
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4790 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4791 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4792
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4793 C-c & reftex-view-crossref
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4794 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4795
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4796 C-c = reftex-toc
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4797 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4798 can quickly jump to every section.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4799
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4800 Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4801 commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4802 Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4803 reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4804 C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4805
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4806 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4807
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4808 *** Info documentation is now available.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4809
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4810 *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4811 both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4812
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4813 *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4814 bibtex-user-optional-fields.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4815
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4816 *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4817 (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4818
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4819 *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4820 entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4821 appropriate functions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4822
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4823 *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4824 entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4825
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4826 *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4827 been cleaned.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4828
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4829 *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4830 bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4831
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4832 *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4833 shall be delimited.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4834
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4835 *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4836 bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4837 bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4838
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4839 *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4840 field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4841 prefixed with `ALT'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4842
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4843 *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4844 bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4845 formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4846 documentation).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4847
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4848 *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4849 documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4850 for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4851
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4852 *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4853 comma should be inserted at end of last field.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4854
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4855 *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4856 alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4857 signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4858
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4859 *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4860
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4861 *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4862
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4863 *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4864 from alien sources.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4865
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4866 *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4867 to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4868 crossref entries.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4869
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4870 *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4871 region.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4872
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4873 *** Added support for imenu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4874
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4875 *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4876 of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4877 `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4878 `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4879
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4880 *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4881 from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4882
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4883 ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4884
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4885 ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4886 functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4887 Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4888 as an argument.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4889
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4890 When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4891 and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4892
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4893 ** browse-url changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4894
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4895 *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4896 Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4897 (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4898 non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4899 customization variables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4900
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4901 *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4902
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4903 *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4904 lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4905 (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4906
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4907 ** Changes in Ediff
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4908
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4909 *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4910 pops up the Info file for this command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4911
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4912 *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4913 the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4914 merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4915 directories).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4916
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4917 *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4918 and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4919 files in the same directory.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4920
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4921 *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4922 The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4923 related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4924
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4925 ** Changes in Viper
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4926
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4927 *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4928 *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4929 instead of vip-.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4930 *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4931 *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4932 Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4933 *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4934 *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4935 *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4936 color when Viper is in insert state.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4937 *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4938 Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4939 viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4940
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4941 ** Etags changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4942
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4943 *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4944 default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4945 Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4946 variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4947 not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4948
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4949 *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4950
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4951 *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4952 constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4953
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4954 *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4955 recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4956 In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4957
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4958 *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4959 C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4960 recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4961 methods and protocols.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4962
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4963 *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4964 .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4965 column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4966 paragraph name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4967
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4968 *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4969 an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4970 at least M times and as many as N times.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4971
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4972 ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4973 in files has changed slightly.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4974
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4975 With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4976 time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4977 This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4978 with old time-stamp-format values.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4979
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4980 In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4981 (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4982 This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4983 reasons.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4984
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4985 In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4986 natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4987 fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4988 (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4989 time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4990 specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4991
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4992 Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4993 case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4994 truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4995
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4996 The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4997 being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4998 future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4999 recommended now will continue to work then.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5000
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5001 See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5002 details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5003
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5004 ** There are some additional major modes:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5005
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5006 dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5007 m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5008 meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5009
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5010 ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5011 copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5012 into Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5013
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5014 ** New Lisp packages include:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5015
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5016 *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5017
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5018 *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5019 be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5020
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5021 *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5022
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5023 *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5024 in shell buffers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5025
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5026 *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5027 See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5028 and `elint-defun'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5029
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5030 *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5031 meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5032 ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5033 strings or comments.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5034
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5035 These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5036 abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5037 you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5038 insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5039 at these points.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5040
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5041 *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5042 can visit them by short forms of their names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5043
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5044 *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5045 Emacs Lisp function at point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5046
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5047 *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5048
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5049 *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5050 switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5051
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5052 *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5053
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5054 *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5055
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5056 *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5057
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5058 *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5059 from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5060
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5061 *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5062 You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5063 inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5064 original place after inserting the copy.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5065
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5066 *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5067 on the buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5068
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5069 You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5070 velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5071 (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5072
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5073 Enable mouse-drag with:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5074 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5075 -or-
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5076 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5077
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5078 *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5079 mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5080
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5081 *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5082 It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5083
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5084 *** ogonek
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5085
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5086 The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5087 Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5088 platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5089 TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5090 ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5091 prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5092 instance) and vice versa.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5093
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5094 To use this package load it using
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5095 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5096 Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5097 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5098 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5099 The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5100 ways of customization in `.emacs'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5101
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5102 *** Interface to ph.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5103
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5104 Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5105
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5106 The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5107 services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5108 these servers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5109
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5110 *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5111
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5112 *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5113 You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5114 while the real cursor does not move.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5115
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5116 *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5117 for visiting your favorite web sites.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5118
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5119 *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5120 so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5121
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5122 ** movemail change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5123
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5124 Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5125 mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5126 supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5127 user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5128
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5129 This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5130
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5131 * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5132
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5133 ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5134
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5135 Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5136 end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5137 Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5138 file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5139 file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5140
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5141 To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5142 C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5143 coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5144 specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5145 LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5146 save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5147
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5148 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5149
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5150 ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5151 Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5152 vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5153 Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5154
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5155 ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5156 to start with w32- instead of win32-.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5157
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5158 In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5159 don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5160 "win".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5161
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5162 ** Basic Lisp changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5163
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5164 *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5165 evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5166
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5167 *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5168 be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5169 or by the user.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5170
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5171 The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5172
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5173 *** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5174
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5175 (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5176 (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5177
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5178 *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5179 usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5180 its argument.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5181
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5182 *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5183
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5184 *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5185
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5186 *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5187
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5188 *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5189 error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5190 include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5191 `format' function.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5192
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5193 *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5194 or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5195 whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5196
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5197 *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5198 either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5199 adding one of these suffixes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5200
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5201 *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5202 which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5203 If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5204
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5205 We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5206 because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5207
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5208 *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5209
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5210 *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5211 You must load the `cl' library to define it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5212
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5213 *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5214 conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5215
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5216 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5217
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5218 BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5219 BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5220
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5221 *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5222 choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5223 restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5224 works using `save-current-buffer'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5225
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5226 *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5227 write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5228 of the last form.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5229
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5230 *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5231 which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5232 last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5233 as the last form.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5234
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5235 *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5236 characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5237 matches.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5238
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5239 For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5240
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5241 *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5242 with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5243 Then it returns that string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5244
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5245 For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5246
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5247 (with-output-to-string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5248 (princ "The buffer is ")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5249 (princ (buffer-name)))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5250
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5251 returns "The buffer is foo".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5252
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5253 ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5254 is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5255
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5256 These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5257 buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5258 characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5259
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5260 *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5261 a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5262
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5263 Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5264 character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5265 Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5266 position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5267 characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5268 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5269
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5270 ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5271 Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5272 non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5273 characters".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5274
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5275 The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5276 through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5277 "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5278 range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5279 leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5280
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5281 *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5282 (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5283 multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5284 character, which may be more than one buffer position.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5285
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5286 This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5287 always one buffer position, need to be changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5288
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5289 However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5290
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5291 *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5292 because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5293 have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5294 the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5295 guaranteed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5296
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5297 *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5298 between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5299 character).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5300
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5301 When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5302
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5303 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5304 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5305 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5306 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5307 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5308
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5309 *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5310
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5311 *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5312 `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5313 more than the number of characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5314
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5315 You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5316 it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5317 \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5318 is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5319 follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5320 newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5321
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5322 *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5323 and returns a string containing those characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5324
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5325 *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5326 (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5327 counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5328 character, sref signals an error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5329
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5330 *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5331 in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5332 string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5333
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5334 *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5335 in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5336 region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5337
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5338 *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5339 the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5340 to a vector of the characters in it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5341
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5342 *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5343 of a string. You call it as follows:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5344
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5345 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5346
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5347 This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5348 STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5349 This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5350 Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5351 it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5352
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5353 *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5354 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5355
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5356 *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5357 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5358
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5359 *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5360 to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5361 not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5362 which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5363
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5364 (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5365
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5366 This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5367
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5368 The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5369 If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5370 are not included in the resulting value.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5371
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5372 The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5373 at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5374 WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5375 is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5376
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5377 If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5378 place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5379 character extends across that column), then the padding character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5380 PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5381 string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5382 column START-COLUMN.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5383
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5384 *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5385 the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5386 necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5387 difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5388 changed text, before the change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5389
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5390 *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5391 sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5392 one character set for each script, not for each language.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5393
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5394 **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5395
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5396 **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5397
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5398 **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5399 set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5400
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5401 **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5402 name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5403 which identify the character within that character set.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5404
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5405 **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5406 byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5407 opposite of split-char.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5408
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5409 **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5410 of all the characters between BEG and END.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5411
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5412 **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5413 of all the characters in a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5414
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5415 *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5416 and specifying coding systems.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5417
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5418 **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5419 system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5420 of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5421 (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5422 and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5423 as what to do about code conversion.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5424
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5425 **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5426 name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5427
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5428 **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5429 for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5430 except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5431
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5432 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5433 which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5434 to match against a file name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5435
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5436 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5437 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5438 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5439 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5440 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5441 specifies the coding system for encoding.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5442
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5443 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5444 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5445
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5446 **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5447 the coding system to use for network sockets.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5448
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5449 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5450 which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5451 either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5452 service names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5453
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5454 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5455 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5456 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5457 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5458 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5459 specifies the coding system for encoding.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5460
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5461 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5462 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5463
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5464 **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5465 for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5466 except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5467 start the subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5468
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5469 **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5470 systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5471 when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5472 (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5473 to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5474
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5475 **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5476 coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5477 subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5478
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5479 It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5480 but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5481 start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5482 connection permanently or until overridden.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5483
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5484 The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5485 file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5486 network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5487 coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5488 It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5489 system for one operation at a time.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5490
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5491 **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5492 files, subprocesses or network connections.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5493
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5494 **** The function process-coding-system tells you what
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5495 coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5496 The value is a cons cell,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5497 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5498 where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5499 the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5500 input to the subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5501
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5502 **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5503 change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5504
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5505 ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5506 customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5507 you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5508
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5509 You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5510 variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5511 information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5512 legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5513 customization.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5514
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5515 Thus, instead of writing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5516
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5517 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5518 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5519
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5520 you would now write this:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5521
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5522 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5523 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5524 :type 'boolean
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5525 :group foo)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5526
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5527 The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5528 two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5529 describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5530 for a description of them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5531
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5532 The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5533 should belong to. You define a new group like this:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5534
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5535 (defgroup ispell nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5536 "Spell checking using Ispell."
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5537 :group 'processes)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5538
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5539 The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5540 group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5541 but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5542 to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5543 second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5544
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5545 Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5546 package should have just one group; a more complex package should
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5547 have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5548 package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5549 first-level subgroups.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5550
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5551 ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5552
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5553 This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5554 separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5555
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5556 ** easy-mmode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5557
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5558 The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5559 developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5560 only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5561 predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5562 `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5563 `easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5564
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5565 ** Text property changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5566
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5567 *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5568 text property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5569
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5570 *** The new functions next-char-property-change and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5571 previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5572 place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5573 functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5574 starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5575
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5576 If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5577 LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5578 of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5579 position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5580
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5581 *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5582 value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5583 is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5584
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5585 ** Changes in invisibility features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5586
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5587 *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5588 hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5589 is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5590 should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5591 would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5592 make the overlay visible.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5593
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5594 During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5595 invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5596 needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5597 which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5598 the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5599 t when it should hide it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5600
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5601 *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5602
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5603 Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5604 invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5605 and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5606 Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5607 manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5608 Here is an example of how to do this:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5609
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5610 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5611 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5612 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5613 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5614
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5615 ...
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5616 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5617
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5618 ...
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5619 ;; When done with the overlays:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5620 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5621 ;; Or respectively:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5622 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5623
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5624 ** Changes in syntax parsing.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5625
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5626 *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5627 `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5628 obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5629 `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5630
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5631 If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5632 is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5633 used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5634
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5635 When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5636 character in the buffer is calculated thus:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5637
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5638 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5639 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5640
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5641 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5642 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5643 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5644
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5645 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5646 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5647 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5648 determine the syntax type of the character.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5649
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5650 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5651 of the current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5652
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5653 *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5654 value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5655 for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5656
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5657 *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5658 and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5659 only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5660 character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5661 another character with the same code (unless quoted).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5662
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5663 These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5664 text property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5665
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5666 *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5667 arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5668 of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5669
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5670 *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5671 (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5672 element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5673 nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5674 string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5675
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5676 *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5677 syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5678 `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5679
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5680 ** Changes in face features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5681
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5682 *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5683 if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5684
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5685 *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5686 of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5687
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5688 *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5689 set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5690
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5691 *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5692 set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5693
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5694 *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5695 by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5696 and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5697 the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5698 overlay property).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5699
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5700 This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5701 arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5702
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5703 ** Changes in file-handling functions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5704
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5705 *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5706 directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5707 they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5708 is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5709
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5710 This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5711 begins with ~.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5712
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5713 *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5714 it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5715
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5716 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5717 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5718
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5719 *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5720 as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5721
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5722 *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5723 character code conversion as well as other things.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5724
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5725 Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5726 (formerly it did not).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5727
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5728 *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5729 environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5730
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5731 *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5732 instead of constant strings.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5733
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5734 *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5735 to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5736 any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5737
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5738 substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5739 in the same way as before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5740
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5741 *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5742 The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5743 which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5744
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5745 *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5746 error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5747 else, and returns nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5748
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5749 *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5750 directory cannot be listed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5751
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5752 ** Changes in minibuffer input
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5753
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5754 *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5755 read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5756 additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5757 argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5758 ways:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5759
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5760 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5761 It is available through the history command M-n.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5762
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5763 *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5764 read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5765 argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5766 minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5767 enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5768
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5769 In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5770 argument in this way.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5771
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5772 *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5773 from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5774 minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5775
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5776 ** Echo area features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5777
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5778 *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5779 echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5780 minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5781 after the echo area is cleared.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5782
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5783 *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5784 in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5785
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5786 ** Keyboard input features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5787
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5788 *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5789 set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5790
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5791 *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5792 received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5793 by keyboard macros.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5794
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5795 ** Frame-related changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5796
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5797 *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5798 creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5799 hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5800
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5801 *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5802 the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5803 has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5804
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5805 *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5806 selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5807 value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5808 in the selected frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5809
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5810 *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5811 is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5812 which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5813
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5814 ** X Windows features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5815
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5816 *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5817 x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5818 x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5819
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5820 *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5821 The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5822
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5823 *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5824 MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5825 A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5826
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5827 If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5828 it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5829
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5830 ** Subprocess features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5831
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5832 *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5833 functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5834 automatically.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5835
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5836 *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5837 and returns the output from the command as a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5838
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5839 *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5840 and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5841
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5842 ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5843 does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5844
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5845 ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5846 at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5847 goes after the other menu items.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5848
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5849 ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5850 of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5851 around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5852 are in use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5854 The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5855 series of several changes--if that seems safe.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5856
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5857 Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5858 after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5859 form.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5860
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5861 ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5862 is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5863 but its hook is still run.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5864
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5865 ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5866 for errors that are handled by condition-case.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5867
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5868 If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5869 regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5870 useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5871
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5872 This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5873 are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5874 filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5875 warned.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5876
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5877 ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5878 way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5879
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5880 ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5881 integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5882 functions like display-time.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5883
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5884 ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5885 name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5886
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5887 ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5888 can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5889 is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5890
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5891 ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5892 if there is an error in compilation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5893
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5894 ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5895 switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5896 argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5897 they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5898
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5899 ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5900 Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5901 the *scratch* buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5902
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5903 ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5904 The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5905 where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5906 e.g., in Font Lock mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5907
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5908 ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5909 and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5910 It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5911
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5912 ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5913 using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5914 variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5915 and compose-mail-other-frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5916
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5917 ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5918 can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5919 full name of the specified user will be returned.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5920
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5921 ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5922 of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5923 where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5924 in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5925 option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5926 files at all.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5927
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5928 ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5929 and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5930 width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5931 the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5932
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5933 For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5934 minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5935 with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5936 is how %S normally pads to two positions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5937
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5938 ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5939
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5940 ** imenu.el changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5941
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5942 You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5943 item from menu created by imenu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5944
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5945 An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5946 #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5947 select one of those items.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5948
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5949 * Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5950
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5951 * Changes in Emacs 19.33.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5952
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5953 ** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5954 mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5955
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5956 ** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5957 use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5958 Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5959
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5960 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5961
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5962 ** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5963 To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5964
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5965 ** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5966 conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5967 matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5968 expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5969 word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5970 all caps.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5971
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5972 ** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5973 at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5974
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5975 When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5976 does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5977 as in previous Emacs versions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5978
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5979 ** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5980 non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5981 time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5982 frames.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5983
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5984 ** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5985 if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5986 This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5987 Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5988 accident.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5989
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5990 ** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5991 keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5992 It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5993 line and then executing the macro.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5994
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5995 This command is not new, but was never documented before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5996
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5997 ** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5998 (something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5999 characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6000 characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6001
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6002 ** Font Lock mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6003
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6004 *** Font Lock support modes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6005
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6006 Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6007 below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6008 hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6009 to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6010 Font Lock mode is enabled.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6011
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6012 For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6013
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6014 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6015
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6016 in your ~/.emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6017
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6018 *** lazy-lock
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6019
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6020 The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6021 only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6022 becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6023 Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6024 occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6025 buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6026 Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6027
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6028 To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6029
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6030 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6031
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6032 To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6033
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6034 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6035
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6036 *** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6037 paren and key.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6038
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6039 *** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6040 supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6041
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6042 ** Gnus changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6043
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6044 Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6045 commands and variables have been added. There should be no
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6046 significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6047 previously released version, except in the message composition area.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6048
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6049 Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6050 between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6051
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6052 *** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6053 variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6054 obsolete.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6055
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6056 *** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6057 missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6058
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6059 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6060
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6061 *** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6062
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6063 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6064
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6065 *** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6066 referred.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6067
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6068 *** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6069
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6070 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6071
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6072 *** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6073
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6074 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6075
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6076 *** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6077 buffers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6078
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6079 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6080
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6081 *** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6082
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6083 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6084
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6085 *** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6086
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6087 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6088
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6089 *** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6090
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6091 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6092
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6093 *** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6094 is possible.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6095
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6096 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6097
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6098 *** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6099 groups of groups.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6100
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6101 *** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6102
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6103 *** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6104 batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6105
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6106 *** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6107
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6108 *** The Gnus cache is much faster.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6109
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6110 *** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6111
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6112 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6113
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6114 *** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6115 expiration times.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6116
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6117 *** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6118
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6119 *** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6120 process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6121
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6122 *** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6123 articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6124 bound to keys on the `/' submap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6125
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6126 *** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6127 articles with the `*' command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6128
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6129 *** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6130
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6131 *** Article headers can be buttonized.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6132
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6133 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6134
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6135 *** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6136
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6137 *** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6138 `nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6139
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6140 *** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6141 buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6142
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6143 *** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6144
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6145 *** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6146
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6147 *** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6148
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6149 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6150
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6151 *** Groups can be made permanently visible.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6152
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6153 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6154
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6155 *** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6156
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6157 *** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6158
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6159 *** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6160
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6161 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6162 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6163
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6164 *** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6165 refetching.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6166
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6167 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6168
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6169 *** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6170 buffer to allow easier treatment.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6171
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6172 *** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6173
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6174 *** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6175
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6176 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6177
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6178 *** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6179 articles.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6180
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6181 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6182
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6183 *** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6184
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6185 *** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6186 cited text to hide is now customizable.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6187
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6188 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6189
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6190 *** Boring headers can be hidden.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6191
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6192 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6193
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6194 *** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6195
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6196 *** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6197
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6198 The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6199 in greater detail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6200
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6201 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6202
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6203 ** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6204 second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6205 asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6206 exists.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6207
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6208 ** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6209 as well as lists.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6210
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6211 ** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6212 of a given keymap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6213
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6214 ** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6215 given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6216 keymap or nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6217
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6218 ** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6219 an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6220 name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6221 menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6222 equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6223 alias.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6224
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6225 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6226
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6227 ** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6228
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6229 Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6230 This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6231 was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6232 far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6233 pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6234
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6235 For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6236 you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6237 `http://www.vtw.org/'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6238
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6239 ** A note about C mode indentation customization.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6240
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6241 The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6242 do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6243 It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6244 much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6245 chapter of the manual for details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6246
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6247 However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6248 customization variables take effect.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6249
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6250 ** Marking with the mouse.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6251
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6252 When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6253 highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6254 using M-x transient-mark-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6255
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6256 ** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6257
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6258 *** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6259
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6260 *** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6261 to work on NT only and not on 95.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6262
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6263 *** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6264 in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6265 you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6266 application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6267 applications, these problems are significant.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6268
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6269 If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6270 likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6271 However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6272 will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6273 other DOS application as a subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6274
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6275 Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6276 You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6277
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6278 If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6279 subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6280 have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6281 Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6282 separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6283 Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6284
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6285 ** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6286
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6287 This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6288 which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6289 minibuffer contains.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6290
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6291 ** `title' frame parameter and resource.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6292
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6293 The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6294 It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6295 It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6296 affects just the displayed title of the frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6297
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6298 The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6299 it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6300 and also serves as the default for the displayed title
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6301 when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6302
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6303 ** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6304 enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6305
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6306 ** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6307 F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6308 Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6309
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6310 If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6311 menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6312 something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6313 the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6314
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6315 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6316
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6317 ** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6318 to replace the characters it "deletes".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6319
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6320 ** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6321
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6322 ** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6323 a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6324 select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6325 It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6326 immediately after the selected one.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6327
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6328 This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6329 made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6330
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6331 ** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6332
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6333 Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6334 directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6335 If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6336 Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6337 recover-session.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6338
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6339 You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6340 auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6341 will not work.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6342
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6343 Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6344 normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6345 this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6346 bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6347 now that the bug is fixed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6348
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6349 ** Changes to Version Control (VC)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6350
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6351 There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6352 when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6353 Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6354 which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6355
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6356 If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6357 telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6358 VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6359 the link is visited and a warning displayed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6360
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6361 ** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6362 Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6363 is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6364
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6365 There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6366 Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6367 enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6368 The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6369 remain normal.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6370
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6371 ** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6372 header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6373
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6374 Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6375 known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6376 offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6377 Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6378
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6379 Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6380 of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6381 a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6382 name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6383 documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6384 `mail-directory-stream'.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6385
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6386 ** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6387 skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6388 characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6389 with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6390
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6391 Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6392 - to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6393 wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6394
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6395 The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6396 less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6397 headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6398 Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6399 Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6400 fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6401 to a limitation in font-lock).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6402
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6403 External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6404
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6405 ** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6406 buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6407 buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6408 this example:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6409
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6410 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6411 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6412
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6413 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6414
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6415 *** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6416
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6417 *** Font Lock mode is now supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6418
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6419 *** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6420
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6421 *** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6422 entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6423 will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6424 isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6425 (bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6426 The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6427
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6428 *** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6429 does the same job.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6430
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6431 *** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6432 "Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6433
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6434 *** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6435 text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6436
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6437 ** Font Lock mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6438
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6439 *** Global Font Lock mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6440
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6441 Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6442 new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6443 font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6444 turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6445 on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6446
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6447 For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6448
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6449 (global-font-lock-mode t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6450
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6451 in your ~/.emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6452
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6453 *** Local Refontification
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6454
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6455 In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6456 However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6457 those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6458 command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6459
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6460 In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6461 (The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6462 current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6463 above and below point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6464
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6465 With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6466
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6467 ** Follow mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6468
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6469 Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6470 buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6471 side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6472 they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6473 split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6474 follow-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6475
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6476 M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6477
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6478 To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6479 command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6480
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6481 ** hide-show changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6482
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6483 The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6484 to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6485 normal hooks.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6486
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6487 ** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6488 The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6489
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6490 ** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6491 recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6492 those that begin a function, record, or macro.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6493
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6494 ** MSDOS Changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6495
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6496 *** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6497 Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6498
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6499 *** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6500 and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6501
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6502 *** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6503
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6504 *** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6505 pressing both mouse buttons.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6506
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6507 *** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6508 restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6509 are:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6510
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6511 **** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6512 now works.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6513
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6514 **** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6515
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6516 **** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6517 implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6518
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6519 **** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6520
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6521 **** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6522
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6523 **** `M-x recover-session' works.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6524
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6525 **** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6526
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6527 **** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6528
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6529 * Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6530
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6531 ** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6532 tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6533 remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6534 this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6535 behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6536
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6537 ** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6538
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6539 The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6540 not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6541 need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6542 be different.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6543
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6544 It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6545 than `system-type'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6546
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6547 See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6548
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6549 ** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6550 now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6551
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6552 ** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6553 that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6554
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6555 ** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6556 no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6557 reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6558
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6559 The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6560 to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6561 like this:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6562
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6563 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6564
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6565 SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6566 It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6567 becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6568
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6569 REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6570 seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6571 means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6572
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6573 *** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6574 up if too much time passes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6575
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6576 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6577
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6578 This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6579 If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6580 of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6581 form in BODY.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6582
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6583 *** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6584 a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6585 call looks like this:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6586
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6587 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6588
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6589 SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6590 runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6591 timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6592 ARGS.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6593
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6594 Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6595 command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6596 command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6597
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6598 REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6599 time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6600 does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6601 each time Emacs becomes idle.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6602
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6603 If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6604 idle for SECS seconds.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6605
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6606 *** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6607 all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6608 programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6609 instead.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6610
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6611 *** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6612 there is no answer within a certain time.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6613
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6614 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6615
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6616 asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6617 within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6618 Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6619
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6620 ** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6621 arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6622 meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6623 arguments in between are ignored.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6624
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6625 This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6626 the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6627
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6628 ** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6629 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6630 /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6631 site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6632 version.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6633
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6634 It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6635 version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6636 for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6637 has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6638 and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6639 problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6640
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6641 ** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6642 .abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6643 systems with limited file name syntax.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6644
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6645 Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6646 convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6647 for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6648 completions.el:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6649
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6650 (defvar save-completions-file-name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6651 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6652 "*The filename to save completions to.")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6653
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6654 This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6655 depends on the operating system, because the definition of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6656 convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6657 Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6658 MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6659
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6660 ** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6661 rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6662 minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6663
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6664 ** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6665 marker from its buffer position.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6666
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6667 ** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6668 Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6669 The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6670
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6671 ** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6672 that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6673 condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6674 of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6675 matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6676 regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6677
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6678 This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6679 errors that happen often during editing.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6680
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6681 ** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6682 into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6683 puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6684
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6685 ** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6686 now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6687
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6688 ** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6689 a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6690 name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6691 to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6692 and not get-buffer-window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6693
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6694 ** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6695 calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6696 being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6697
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6698 If you use this feature, you should set the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6699 buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6700 property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6701 non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6702 are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6703 property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6704 over and over for the same text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6705
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6706 ** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6707
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6708 *** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6709 in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6710
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6711 ;; @(#) HEADER: text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6712 ;; $HEADER: text $
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6713
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6714 in addition to the normal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6715
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6716 ;; HEADER: text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6717
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6718 *** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6719 checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6720 lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6721
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6722 * For older news, see the file ONEWS.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6723
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6724 ----------------------------------------------------------------------
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6725 Copyright information:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6726
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6727 Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6728
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6729 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6730 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6731 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6732 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6733
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6734 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6735 of this document, or of portions of it,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6736 under the above conditions, provided also that they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6737 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6738
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6739 Local variables:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6740 mode: outline
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6741 paragraph-separate: "[ ]*$"
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6742 end: